Samsung | YP-R1AS | Samsung YP-R1AB صارف گائیڈ

‫‪YP-R1‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮ ‚ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/register‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫)‪ (firmware‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ "MP3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫> <‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ؛ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪) <Yes> :‬ﺑﻠﻪ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺬﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﻨﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﺲ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺪﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‚ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﭼﺮﺧﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﮦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ۔‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﮦ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻭﮦ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﮐﺮﺩﮦ ﺍﺳﺖ۔‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ‚ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺮک ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﮐﺮﻳﻠﻴﮏ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺯﺧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯽ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 85‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺪی ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫)ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺻﺪﺍی ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 60‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﺮﻭﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 80‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻗﻮﻳﺎً‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• پﺧﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،(35°C)95°F‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﻧﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﺭک ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺵ)ﻫﺎﻱ( ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‚‬
‫ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﮐﭙﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﻤﺎﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ”‪Fit to‬‬
‫‪ “Page‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‬
‫)™ ‪ Samsung (DNSe‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ‪ Beat DJ‬ﺩی ﺟﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﮑﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﺒﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ! ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻨﯽ ﭘﻠﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢۴‬‬
‫‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻨﯽ ﭘﻠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٢۶‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣۴‬‬
‫‪٣۴‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪۴٢‬‬
‫‪۴٢‬‬
‫‪۴۴‬‬
‫‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪EmoDio‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪Beat DJ‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۴٨‬‬
‫‪۴٩‬‬
‫‪۴٩‬‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫‪۵١‬‬
‫‪۵١‬‬
‫‪۵٣‬‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫‪۵۶‬‬
‫‪۵۶‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫‪۵٨‬‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶١‬‬
‫‪۶٣‬‬
‫‪۶۴‬‬
‫‪۶۴‬‬
‫‪۶۶‬‬
‫‪۶٧‬‬
‫‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪۶٩‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻠﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ )ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺘﺎﮐﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪٧...............................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ‪٨.................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪٩.....................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪١١............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪١٢................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪١۴...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪١٨.........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢١...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻨﯽ ﭘﻠﻴﺮ ‪٢٢....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪٢٣.........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٢۵................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﻗﻼﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ )ﺭﻳﺴﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺸﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﻧﻮک ﺗﻴﺰ‬
‫)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻮک ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﻗﻼﺏ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫)ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺮ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) USB‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<USB connected‬‬
‫)‪ USB‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪ(‬
‫>‬
‫>‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫<‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫<‪ً :‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﻪ < ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ~ ‪ 35‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ 41‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ~ ‪ 95‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎی ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳌﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳌﺴﯽ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻗﻼﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮک‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﻧﻮک ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺸﮏ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﮐﺜﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﻧﻮک ﺗﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﻪ < ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳌﺴﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﻪ < ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Style‬ﺳﺒﮏ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﻭی > ﻳﺎ < ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﻪ < ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Icon‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﻪ < ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﻭی >‪ <V‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﻭ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﻬﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﭘﺮﻣﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Widget‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ" ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ" ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﻪ < ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺍی‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫• ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی > ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫• ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺰی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی )‪ Microsoft Outlook (.ics‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫>‪) <File Browser‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ←‬
‫>‪) <My Pack‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ( ← >‪<Calendar‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ( ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﻪ < ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺽ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻗﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺭﻭی > ﻳﺎ <‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ؛ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ٢۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧١‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﻭﺗﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﯽ ﭘﻠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻨﯽ ﭘﻠﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﻴﺴﮑﻮﺋﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻠﺒﺮگ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭﺍﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺩﻭﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻥ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﯿﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﻨﯽ ﭘﻠﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎی‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ‪ "Bluetooth‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۵٩‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﯿﻨﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻠﯿﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻨﯽ ﭘﻠﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻨﯽ ﭘﻠﻴﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺭﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯﺳﺮﮔﯿﺮی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﱳ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻋﺪﺩی ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی ↔ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ )ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ )ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﻪ < ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﱳ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮﮐﺠﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﮐﺠﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫▼ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻭﺍژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی ↔ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ )ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪ TV-OUT‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ TV-OUT‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <TV Out‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺮﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ‪٢٧........................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮیﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪٣١.........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪٣٢..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍی‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻬﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻬﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،MP3، WMA، Ogg، AAC، FLAC‬ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ،AVI، WMV‬ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪ ،JPG، BMP‬ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪TXT‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻠﺶ‬
‫‪SWF‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫‪CPU‬‬
‫‪ Pentium 500 MHz‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪Windows 2000/XP/Vista‬‬
‫• ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 768X 1024‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ Microsoft DirectX 9.0‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ Internet Explorer 6.0‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی < ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪EmoDio‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ EmoDio‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ EmoDio‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ EmoDio‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭی ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪ EmoDio‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪ EmoDio‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <My PC‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ EmoDio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <Add Folder‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ( ﻳﺎ >‪) <Add File‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫■‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺎﺏ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ FAT32‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﺭﻭی >‪<Restore device defaults‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ®‪ Gracenote‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ Gracenote CDDB® Music Recognition ServiceSM‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ CDDB‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﮔﻮ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭی ‪ ،Gracenote‬ﻟﻮﮔﻮ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭی ‪Gracenote‬‬
‫‪ CDDB‬ﻭ ﻟﻮﮔﻮی "‪ ،"Powered by Gracenote CDDB‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪Music Recognition .‬‬
‫‪ Service‬ﻭ ‪ MRS‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی < ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ >‪) <My Computer‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ( ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫>‪ <R1‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪) DRM‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DRM‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )‪ (DRM‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻖ ﻧﺸﺮ )ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ( ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی < ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ Windows‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺳﻄﻞ ﺁﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ EmoDio‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍی‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺳﻮﺭﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Beat DJ‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺩی‬
‫ﺟﯽ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣۴.......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪٣٨..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۴۵.............................................................................. Beat DJ‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍی" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ >‪<Change View Type‬‬
‫‪٣۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ )ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯﺳﺮﮔﻴﺮی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ EmoDio‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪ EmoDio‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ )‪ (smi.‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ 15‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ؛ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺳﭙﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ >‪ : <B.MARK‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪ <B.MARK‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫>‪) <Add Bookmark‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی >‪ <B.MARK‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ >‪<Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی >‪ <B.MARK‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫>‪) <Delete Bookmark‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪ Mosaic Search‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ ١۵‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫)ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ(‬
‫ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪TV Out‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ "ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ" ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫)ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Horizontal‬‬
‫ >‪) <1 File‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ :(1‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪی‪.‬‬‫‪Stroke‬‬
‫ >‪) <Seek‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ(‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬‫)ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ(‬
‫)‪.(x1 → x2 → x4 → x8‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ >‪) <30sec Skip‬ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ 30 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪) <1min Skip> -‬ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‪ 1 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍی" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﺭﺷﻴﻮ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫>‪) <Recently Added‬ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫ﻭ >‪) <(Most Played (50‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ )‪ ((50‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪)Artists‬ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ(*‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Albums‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻣﻬﺎ(*‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Songs‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ(*‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺎﻡ )ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Genres‬ﺳﺒﮑﻬﺎ(*‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫)ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ(‬
‫‪Recently Added‬‬
‫)ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫‪Most Played 50‬‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ )‪((50‬‬
‫‪Recorded Files‬‬
‫)ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫‪Music Browser‬‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ(‬
‫‪) Unknown‬ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﺒﮏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺗﺎ ‪ 50‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ >‪) <FM Radio‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ (FM‬ﻳﺎ >‪) <Voice REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺍک )ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪ (ID3‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺍک )ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪ (ID3‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺍک ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‪ ID3‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪ ID3‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﺍﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﺎﺩﻳﺘﺎی ﻣﻨﻀﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ MP3‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺮﺍک ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی >‪<Now Playing‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ >‪) <Artists‬ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ(‪) <Albums> ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻣﻬﺎ(‪<Genres> ،‬‬
‫)ﺳﺒﮑﻬﺎ( ﻳﺎ >‪) <Playlists‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﮏ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯﺳﺮﮔﻴﺮی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍک‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺮﺍک ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻞ ﺗﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ >‪ :<A ↔ B‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍک‬‫‪ :‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی >‪ <A ↔ B‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫>→ ‪ <A‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی >‪ <A ↔ B‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﺍک ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫>‪ <A ↔ B‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭی >‪ <A ↔ B‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍک ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ )‪(DNSe‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪ <DNSe‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Auto‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍک )ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪ (ID3‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی >‪<myDNSe 1‬‬
‫)‪ myDNSe‬ﻣﻦ‪ (1‬ﻳﺎ >‪ myDNSe) <myDNSe 2‬ﻣﻦ‪ (2‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "‪ "myDNSe‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧١‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DNSe‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )‪ (DNSe‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP3‬ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Samsung‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪ ID3‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺟﻠﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻭﺍژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪) Artists‬ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫‪) Albums‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻣﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <Playlists‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Songs‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ( ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی >‪Add New‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪) <Playlist‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻭﺍژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ >‪) <Artists‬ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ( ﻳﺎ >‪) <Albums‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻣﻬﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺍک )ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪ (ID3‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی >‪) <Rename‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﺎﻡ( ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴٣‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <Add to Playlist‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻳﮏ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺒﮑﻬﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی >‪<Add to Playlist‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬
‫>‪) <Add to Playlist‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Playlists‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی >‪Delete from‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪) <Playlist‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی >‪<Add New Playlist‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﺤﻮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music Play‬‬
‫‪) Screen‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Horizontal‬‬
‫‪Stroke‬‬
‫)ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺟﻠﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Add to Playlist‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ >‪ ) <1 Song‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪ :( 1‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬‫ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪی‪.‬‬
‫ >‪) <10sec Skip‬ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ 10 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬‫ﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ >‪) <30sec Skip‬ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ 30 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬‫ﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ >‪) <1min Skip‬ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‪ 1 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﺩ‬‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ(‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ Ogg Q10‬ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Beat DJ‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ‪ Beat DJ‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی >‪ ) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ beat DJ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯﺳﺮﮔﻴﺮی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺳﮑﺮچ‬
‫‪۴۶‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ‪Beat DJ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی >‪ ) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺳﮑﺮچ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺳﮑﺮچ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ‪Beat DJ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی >‪ ) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ‪۴٩..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎ ‪۵١...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪۵۴............................................................................ FM‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻠﺶ ‪۵٧........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ ‪۵٨....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۵٩............................................................................Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺘﺎﮐﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪۶۶.............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‪۶٧...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‪۶٨............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍی" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ )ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ < ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﺤﻮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪Start Slideshow‬‬
‫)ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ(‬
‫‪ Slideshow Effect‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﻫﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬
‫‪) Assign‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ( ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV Out‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ" ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫)ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‬
‫‪ ٢۵‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﻣﱳ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ )‪ (txt.‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍی" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪<Change View Type‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬
‫• ﺭﻭی > ﻳﺎ < ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪۵٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ < ﻣﱳ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪ <B.MARK‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬
‫>‪) <Add Bookmark‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی >‪ <B.MARK‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ >‪<Go to Bookmark‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی>‪ <B.MARK‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫>‪) <Delete Bookmark‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﻭی >‪) <AUTO‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻋﻮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ < ﻣﱳ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﺤﻮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪Text Viewer‬‬
‫‪) Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ(‬
‫‪Font Size‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﮔﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﻭی > ﻳﺎ < ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﻭی > ﻳﺎ < ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی > ﻳﺎ < ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ .FM‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ "FM‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ < ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﻭی > ﻳﺎ < ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬‫‪٢‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی > ﻳﺎ < ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪) <Preset> - ۴‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ(‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ >‪) <Manual‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ(‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬‫ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‬‫‪۵‬‬
‫ ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭی‬
‫■‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی >‪)<Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫>‪) <No‬ﺧﻴﺮ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ >‪) <File Browser‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( >‪Recorded‬‬
‫‪) <Files‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ( >‪) <FM Radio‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ (FM‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ < ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <Add to Preset‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 30‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﺤﻮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪) Add to Preset‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ(*‬
‫‪Delete from Preset‬‬
‫)ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ(**‬
‫‪) Auto Preset‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <Auto Preset‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Preset‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ( ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ‪(FM‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺗﺎ ‪ 30‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺴﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Worldwide‬‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ(‬
‫‪) USA‬ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ(‬
‫‪) Korea‬ﮐﺮﻩ(‬
‫‪) Japan‬ژﺍﭘﻦ(‬
‫‪ 87.50‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~ ‪ 108.00‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 87.5‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~ ‪ 108.0‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 76.0‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~ ‪ 108.0‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ً‬
‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫** ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻠﺶ )‪(swf.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍی" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯﺳﺮﮔﻴﺮی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻠﺶ )‪ (swf.‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻠﺶ )‪ (swf.‬ﮐﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﯾﻬﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺯی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯی‬
‫‪Wise Star‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Sudoku Champ‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 9‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Bubble Bang‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺒﺎﺑﻬﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺘﺮﮐﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Astro Ranger‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺼﺮی ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﺮی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ )ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪Samsung .‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻴﻬﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ < ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪Bluetooth‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ‪ "Bluetooth‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪File Transfer‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﻭی ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ )ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی(" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮی ‪(Bluetooth‬‬
‫) ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ < ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ )ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺭﻭی ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﺋﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬
‫>‪ : Bluetooth) <Bluetooth : ON‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪Call by Number‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬
‫‪Call History‬‬
‫)ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫>‪) <Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻳﺎ >‪<Delete All‬‬
‫)ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ( >‪) <Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Redial‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ( ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ < ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ >‪) <Call by Number‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﻭی >‪) <Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ(‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ < ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻭی >‪)<Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ DRM‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ >‪) <File Browser‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( >‪Shared‬‬
‫‪) <Data‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ( ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫")‪ "(1‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ < ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﺤﻮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪Bluetooth : ON‬‬
‫)‪ : Bluetooth‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫‪Search Option‬‬
‫)ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ(‬
‫‪My Device Info.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﮐﻪ ﺳﻌﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ 30‬ﻓﻮﺕ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺶ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
۶۵
Bluetooth < ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬Bluetooth ‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮی‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬
SBH500, SBH100
SAMSUNG
HBH-DS970 Sony Ericsson
BT620S
Jabra
BT-HS02-HQ
iBluon
P590, VOYAGER 855
Plantronics
NC1
LUBIX
‫ﺩﯾﺘﺎﮐﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ RSS‬ﺩﺭ ‪ EmoDio‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ UCC ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻭﺑﻼگ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﮐﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺘﺎﮐﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ‪ EmoDio‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ RSS‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ RSS‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ XML‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺑﻼﮔﻬﺎ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭی‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭی‬
‫■‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی >‪)<Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی >‪) <No‬ﺧﻴﺮ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ >‪) <File Browser‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( >‪) <Recorded Files‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫>‪) <Voice‬ﺻﻮﺗﯽ( ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ >‪) <File Browser‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ(‬
‫)ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ( ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ vCard‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Shared Data‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪٧٠.................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٧١ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٧١ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪٧٢ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪٧٢ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪٧٢ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪) Sound‬ﺻﺪﺍ(‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ(‬
‫‪) Language‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ( ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫‪) Time‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫‪) System‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ Street Mode‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍی‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ( ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Upscaler‬‬
‫)ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﮐﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪myDNSe‬‬
‫)‪ DNSe‬ﻣﻦ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ‬
‫)‪ (DNSe‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎی ﻫﺮ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Beep‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫)ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wise‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫)ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(‬
‫ >‪) <Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‬‫ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 15‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺭﻭی ‪ 15‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ >‪) <On‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ‬‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Master EQ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎی ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی >‪) <OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ(‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪) Font‬ﻗﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪Reset My‬‬
‫‪) Skin‬ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ(‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫‪Booting‬‬
‫‪Image‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ(‬
‫‪180º rotate‬‬
‫)ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪(180°‬‬
‫‪Display Off‬‬
‫‪) & Hold‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ(‬
‫‪Brightness‬‬
‫)ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪) Menu‬ﻣﻨﻮ(‬
‫‪Contents‬‬
‫)ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪Date&Time‬‬
‫)ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ(‬
‫‪Date Type‬‬
‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫‪Time Zone‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺍی‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ" ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪My Info‬‬
‫)ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫"ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﺭک" ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪) Sleep‬ﺧﻮﺍﺏ(‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺪﺍﻣﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ TV out Type‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ >‪ :<NTSC‬ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ژﺍﭘﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺰﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‬
‫ >‪) <PAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ BDGHI‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪ :‬ﭼﻴﻦ‪،‬‬‫ﺩﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭک‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻼﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﺰی‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﮕﺎﭘﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺳﻮﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻭژ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫‪) <All> - Hold Option‬ﻫﻤﻪ(‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ(‬
‫ >‪) <Touch Screen Only‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ(‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬‫ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﺭﺷﻴﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪Library‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ )>‪) <Settings‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ( >‪) <Language‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ(‬
‫‪Update‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫>‪) <Contents‬ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(( ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺁﺭﺷﻴﻮ(‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪Default Set‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫)ﻓﺮﻣﺖ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮐﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ‪ DivX‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪Registration‬‬
‫‪) code‬ﮐﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫‪(DivX‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪ DIVX® VIDEO: DivX‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ .DivX, Inc‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺳﻤﺎً ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ‪ DivX‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺒﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ‪www.divx.‬‬
‫‪ com‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪ :DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫®‪ DivX Certified‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪DivX Video-on-‬‬
‫‪ (VOD) Demand‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ DivX VOD‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ‪ vod.divx.com‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DivX VOD‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DivX‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ‪:‬‬
‫"ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ®‪ DivX‬ﺗﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬
‫‪"320x240‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪) About‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ >‪) <Firmware‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ(‪ :‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ‬‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ >‪) <Memory‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ = ‪ 1,000,000,000‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ :‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪٧۶................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ‪٧٧................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ‪٧٩..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‪٨١.............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ‪٨٢...........................................‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻮﻟﯽ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺧﺸﮏ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺎﺯﻭﺋﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ‪ WD-40 ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﮑﯽ )‪ (PC، PE‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻠﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ >‪<Display Off & Hold‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ( ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ EmoDio‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪Key .‬‬
‫‪ Updates and Service Packs‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ 2000‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﮦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺂﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ Windows XP‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Vista‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ < ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺸﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪Samsung .‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪) VBR‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ >‪) <Settings‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ( ←‬
‫>‪) <Language‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ( ← >‪) <Contents‬ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ( ﻋﻮﺽ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﺭﺷﻴﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭﻟﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ‪ EmoDio‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
٧٩
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
/MP3
AAC+/AAC
WMA
/MP3
AAC+/AAC
WMA
AAC+/AAC
YP-R1
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ‬1 / ‫ ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬5.0
(48kHz ~ 8kHz ،320kbps ~ 8kbps) MPEG1/2/2.5 Layer3 •
(48kHz ~ 16kHz ،320kbps ~ 12kbps) WMA •
(48kHz ~ 8kHz ،Q10 ~ Q0 ،400kbps ~ 32kbps) Ogg •
(48kHz ~ 8kHz ،320kbps ~ 8kbps) AAC-LC •
(48kHz ~ 8kHz ،320kbps ~ 8kbps) AAC+ •
(48kHz ~ 8kHz ،320kbps ~ 8kbps) Enhanced-AAC-Plus •
(48kHz ~ 16kHz ،level 8 ~ 0) FLAC •
(44.1kHz ،11.025kHz ،8kHz ،96kbps ~ 20kbps) RA •
(48kHz ~ 8kHz ، wav ‫ ) ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬WAV •
‫ﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
Advanced Simple Profile@Level 5 (480x720 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬MPEG4 •
(480x720 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬/Divx3/4/5 •
AVI/SVI
(480x720 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬Xvid •
High Profile@Level3.0 (480x720 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬H.264/AVC •
Advanced Profile@level1 (480x720 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬WMV9
Advanced Simple Profile@Level 5 (480x720 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬MPEG4 •
MP4
High Profile@Level3.0 (480x720 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬H.264/AVC •
Advanced Profile@level1 (vc1) (480x720 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬WMV9 WMV/ ASF
Advanced Simple Profile@Level 5 (480x720 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬MPEG4 •
MOV
High Profile@Level3.0 (480x720 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬H.264/AVC •
(87a/89a) Gif ،PNG ،(‫ ﺑﻴﺘﯽ‬32 ‫ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬BMP ،(‫ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ‬،‫ )ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬JPEG
(‫ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬ActionScript2.0 ،‫ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬8.0 ‫ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻠﺶ‬SWF
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺶ‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ < ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ 16‬ﺍﻫﻢ(‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~ ‪ 20‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 90‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ‪ 20‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪LPF‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ 1‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 0 ،‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ(‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪5000‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪) 5000‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ 25 :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )‪ ،128kbps ،MP3‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ ،15‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺻﺪﺍ‪ LCD ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ 5 :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ‪ ،3‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪ ،15‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی ﺻﺪﺍ‪(SVI ،‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ~ ‪ 35‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ‬‫)‪ 23‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ~ ‪ 95‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﻤﻖ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪ x 8.9 x 85.2 x 45.5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫‪FM T.H.D‬‬
‫‪%1‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ 55‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ‬
‫‪30 dBμ‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ‪Bluetooth QD‬‬
‫‪B015440‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪F1D‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪RF‬‬
‫ﮐﻼﺱ ‪I‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ 2402‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~ ‪ 2480‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫‪ 2402‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~ ‪ 2480‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 79‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫‪GFSK‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺩﻭﭘﻠﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‬
‫‪% 95 ~ 0‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪EDR + 2.0‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫‪BCM2070‬‬
‫* ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﻌﻨﻮی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﯽ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ISO/IEC 13818-3‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
٨٢
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG ‫ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮی‬،‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻈﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
Country
Customer Care Centre ☎
Web Site
Country
Customer Care Centre ☎
Web Site
CANADA
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/ca
VENEZUELA
0-800-100-5303
www.samsung.com/latin
COLOMBIA
01-8000112112
www.samsung.com.co
02 201 2418
www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr
(French)
MEXICO
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/mx
U.S.A
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/us
ARGENTINE
0800-333-3733
www.samsung.com/ar
BRAZIL
0800-124-421, 4004-0000
www.samsung.com/br
CHILE
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/cl
NICARAGUA
00-1800-5077267
www.samsung.com/latin
HONDURAS
800-7919267
www.samsung.com/latin
COSTA RICA
0-800-507-7267
ECUADOR
1-800-10-7267
www.samsung.com/latin
EL SALVADOR
800-6225
www.samsung.com/latin
GUATEMALA
1-800-299-0013
JAMAICA
1-800-234-7267
PANAMA
BELGIUM
CZECH
REPUBLIC
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
DENMARK
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
www.samsung.com/dk
FINLAND
30-6227 515
www.samsung.com/fi
FRANCE
01 4863 0000
www.samsung.com/fr
GERMANY
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/latin
HUNGARY
01805 - SAMSUNG
(726-7864 € 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/latin
ITALIA
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/it
800-7267
www.samsung.com/latin
LUXEMBURG
02 261 03 710
www.samsung.com/lu
PUERTO RICO
1-800-682-3180
www.samsung.com/latin
NETHERLANDS
www.samsung.com/nl
REP. DOMINICA
1-800-751-2676
www.samsung.com/latin
0900-SAMSUNG
(0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min)
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0 801 1SAMSUNG
(172678), 022-607-93-33
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
NORWAY
POLAND
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/no
٨٣
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﺩﻧﯿﺎ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ < ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ‬
Country
Customer Care Centre
Web Site
Country
Customer Care Centre
Web Site
PORTUGAL
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/pt
AUSTRALIA
1300 362 603
www.samsung.com/au
SLOVAKIA
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/sk
NEW ZEALAND
www.samsung.com/es
SWEDEN
www.samsung.com/se
0800 SAMSUNG
(0800 726 786)
800-810-5858, 400-810-5858,
010-6475 1880
3698-4698
www.samsung.com/nz
SPAIN
902-1-SAMSUNG
(902 172 678)
075-SAMSUNG (726 78 64)
U.K
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
www.samsung.com/uk
EIRE
0818 717 100
www.samsung.com/ie
AUSTRIA
0810-SAMSUNG
(7267864, € 0.07/min)
0848-SAMSUNG
(7267864, CHF 0.08/min)
8-800-555-55-55
www.samsung.com/at
SWITZERLAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
MALAYSIA
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/cn
www.samsung.com/hk
3030 8282, 1800 110011, 1-800- www.samsung.com/in
3000-8282
0800-112-8888
www.samsung.com/id
1800-88-9999
www.samsung.com/my
KAZAKHSTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
SINGAPORE
1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864),
02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
UZBEKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
THAILAND
1800-29-3232, 02-689-3232
www.samsung.com/th
KYRGYZSTAN
00-800-500-55-500
TAIWAN
0800-329-999
www.samsung.com/tw
TADJIKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
VIETNAM
1 800 588 889
www.samsung.com/vn
UKRAINE
8-800-502-0000
www.samsung.ua
TURKEY
444 77 11
www.samsung.com/tr
LITHUANIA
8-800-77777
www.samsung.com/lt
SOUTH AFRICA
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 )
www.samsung.com/za
U.A.E
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864),
8000-4726
www.samsung.com/ae
RUSSIA
www.samsung.ru
LATVIA
8000-7267
www.samsung.com/lv
ESTONIA
800-7267
www.samsung.com/ee
PHILIPPINES
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
٨۴
‫ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom
to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that
you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can
do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to
deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a
program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights
that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps:
(1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for
each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone
understands that there is no warranty for this free software.
If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems
introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents.
We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually
obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this,
we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification
follow.
‫ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬،GNU ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
http:/// ‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬BSD ‫( ﻭ‬GPL)
.‫ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬opensource.samsungmobile.com
‫ﻣﺠﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪ‬
GPL 2.0
Linux Kernel 2.6.24
GPL 2.0
MSC application
BSD 2.0
Video for Linux Two header file
.‫ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬BSD ‫ ﻭ‬GNU، GPL ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ‬
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license
document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to
share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended
to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure
the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most
of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose
authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is
covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it
to your programs, too.
٨۵
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole
or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to
be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms
of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when
run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in
the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute
the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a
copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the
Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.
If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections
when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the
same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program,
the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each
and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights
to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right
to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the
Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a
volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
‫ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ < ﺍﻋﻼﻣﯿﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0) This License applies to any program or other work which contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under
the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to
any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means
either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to
say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter,
translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each
licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered
by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program
is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having
been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what
the Program does.
1) You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code
as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License
and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the
Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a
fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2) You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it,
thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such
modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that
you changed the files and the date of any change.
٨۶
4) You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except
as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5) You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed
it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute
the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law
if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing
the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6) Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original
licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the
recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7) If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions
are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the
conditions of this License.
If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations
under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a
consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only
way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Program.
‫ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ < ﺍﻋﻼﻣﯿﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
3) You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to
give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically
performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to
distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only
for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program
in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with
Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code
means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and
installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source
code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in
either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless
that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to
copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy
the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
٨٧
NO WARRANTY
11) BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS
NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12) IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
‫ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ < ﺍﻋﻼﻣﯿﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and
the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a
consequence of the rest of this License.
8) If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries
either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright
holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit
geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In
such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body
of this License.
9) The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address
new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the
terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published
by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may
choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10) If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs
whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask
for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
٨٨
‫ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ < ﺍﻋﻼﻣﯿﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts
in an interactive mode:
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible
use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which
everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision
comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain
conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the
appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you
use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could
even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary.
Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider
it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is
what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of
this License.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach
them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of
warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to
where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or(at your option) any
later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51
Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
٨٩
‫ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ < ﺍﻋﻼﻣﯿﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
Video for Linux Two header file
Copyright (C) 1999-2007 the contributors
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/
or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﻋﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻭی ‪IEC 61249-2-‬‬
‫‪ 21‬ﮐﻠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻡ ﻭ ‪) PVC‬ﭘﻠﯽ ﻭﻳﻨﻴﻞ ﮐﻠﺮﺍﻳﺪ( ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﻮﺑﻪ ‪ EU RoHS‬ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎک – ﮐﺎﺩﻣﻴﻮﻡ )‪ ،(Cd‬ﺳﺮﺏ )‪ ،(Pb‬ﺟﻴﻮﻩ )‪ ،(Hg‬ﻫﮕﺰﺍﻭﺍﻻﻥ ﮐﺮﻭﻡ )‪ (Cr+6‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪REV. 0.0‬‬
Download PDF